blob: 7c30faff245f262a59831132f84f5cb37c2cc8a5 [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03008 * Copyright (C) 2015 Intel Deutschland GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07009 *
10 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
11 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
12 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
13 */
14
15#ifndef MAC80211_H
16#define MAC80211_H
17
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050018#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070019#include <linux/kernel.h>
20#include <linux/if_ether.h>
21#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +020024#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070025
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040026/**
27 * DOC: Introduction
28 *
29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
32 * drivers.
33 */
34
35/**
36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
37 *
38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070039 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010042 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
43 * tasklet function.
44 *
45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070046 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070047 */
48
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040049/**
50 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070051 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040052 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
54 */
55
56/**
57 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070058 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040059 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
62 * hardware.
63 *
64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
65 *
66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
68 *
69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070071 */
72
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020073/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040074 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
75 *
76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
80 *
81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
82 * suspend.
83 *
84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
85 *
86 */
87
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010088/**
89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
90 *
91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
93 * between different stations/interfaces.
94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
97 *
98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
99 * driver operation.
100 *
101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
102 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
103 *
104 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
105 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
106 *
107 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
108 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
109 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
110 *
111 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
112 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
113 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
114 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
115 * .release_buffered_frames().
116 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
117 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
118 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
119 */
120
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500121struct device;
122
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400123/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200124 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
125 *
126 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100127 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200128 */
129enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200130 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100131 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200132};
133
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200134#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
135
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200136/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800137 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
138 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
139 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
141 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
142 */
143enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
144 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
145 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
146 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
147 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
148};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200149#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800150
151/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400152 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
153 *
154 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100155 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400156 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400157 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200158 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
159 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400160 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100161 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300162 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200163 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400164 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700165struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200166 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100167 u16 cw_min;
168 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200169 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300170 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200171 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700172};
173
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700174struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
175 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
176 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
177 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
178 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
179};
180
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100181/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200182 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100183 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200186 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
187 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200188 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200189 */
190enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100191 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200195 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200196};
197
198/**
199 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
200 *
201 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
202 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
203 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100204 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200205 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200206 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
207 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
208 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
209 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100210 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100211 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200212 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
213 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
214 */
215struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100216 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200217 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200218
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200219 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
220
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100221 bool radar_enabled;
222
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100223 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200224};
225
226/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300227 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
228 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
229 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
230 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
231 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
232 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
233 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
234 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
235 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
236 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
237 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
238 * for changes/removal.)
239 */
240enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
241 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
242 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
243};
244
245/**
246 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
247 *
248 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
249 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
250 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
251 * done.
252 *
253 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
254 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
255 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
256 */
257struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
258 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
259 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
260 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
261};
262
263/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100264 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
265 *
266 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
267 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
268 *
269 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
270 * also implies a change in the AID.
271 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300273 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700274 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200275 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200277 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
278 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
279 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
280 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
281 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
282 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200283 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200284 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300285 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200286 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
287 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200288 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200289 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200290 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300291 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200292 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100293 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
294 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300295 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
296 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100297 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
298 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
299 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100300 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100301 */
302enum ieee80211_bss_change {
303 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
304 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
305 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300306 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200307 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200308 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200309 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200310 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
311 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
312 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200313 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200314 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300315 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200316 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200317 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300318 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200319 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300320 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200321 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100322 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300323 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100324 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100325 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200326
327 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100328};
329
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300330/*
331 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
332 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
333 * filtering will be disabled.
334 */
335#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
336
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100337/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200338 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
339 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200340 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300341 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300342 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
343 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
344 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700345 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200346enum ieee80211_event_type {
347 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200348 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300349 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300350 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200351};
352
353/**
354 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
355 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
356 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
357 */
358enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700359 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
360 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
361};
362
363/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200364 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200365 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
366 */
367struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
368 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
369};
370
371/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200372 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
373 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200374 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200375 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
376 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200377 */
378enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
379 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200380 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200381 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
382 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200383};
384
385/**
386 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
387 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
388 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
389 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
390 */
391enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
392 MLME_SUCCESS,
393 MLME_DENIED,
394 MLME_TIMEOUT,
395};
396
397/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200398 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200399 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
400 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
401 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
402 */
403struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
404 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
405 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
406 u16 reason;
407};
408
409/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300410 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
411 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
412 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300413 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300414 */
415struct ieee80211_ba_event {
416 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
417 u16 tid;
418 u16 ssn;
419};
420
421/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200422 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200423 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200424 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200425 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300426 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300427 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200428 */
429struct ieee80211_event {
430 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
431 union {
432 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200433 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300434 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200435 } u;
436};
437
438/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100439 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
440 *
441 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
442 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
443 *
444 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200445 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
446 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530447 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100448 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
449 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Bergea1b2b452015-06-02 20:15:49 +0200450 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
451 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100452 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200453 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300454 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200455 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100456 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
457 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
458 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
459 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200460 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200461 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
462 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200463 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100464 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
465 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200466 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
467 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
468 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700469 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800470 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200471 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
472 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
473 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300474 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100475 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200476 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
477 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100478 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
479 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100480 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Avri Altman22f66892015-08-18 16:52:07 +0300481 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
482 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
483 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200484 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
Johannes Berge86abc62015-10-22 17:35:14 +0200485 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
486 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
487 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200488 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300489 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
490 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
491 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
492 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100493 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
494 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
495 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200496 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200497 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
498 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
499 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300500 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
501 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200502 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300503 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
504 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200505 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100506 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
507 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
508 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
509 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
510 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
511 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100512 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100513 */
514struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200515 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100516 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200517 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530518 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100519 u16 aid;
520 /* erp related data */
521 bool use_cts_prot;
522 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300523 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200524 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800525 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700526 u16 beacon_int;
527 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200528 u64 sync_tsf;
529 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100530 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100531 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300532 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100533 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200534 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200535 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
536 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100537 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300538 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100539 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200540 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200541 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300542 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300543 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
544 size_t ssid_len;
545 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200546 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100547 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100548 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100549};
550
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800551/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200552 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800553 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700554 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800555 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100556 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200557 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
558 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
559 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
560 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
561 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
562 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
563 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
564 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
565 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
566 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
567 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200568 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200569 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
570 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200571 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200572 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
573 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200574 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200575 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200576 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
577 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
578 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
579 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
580 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
581 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
582 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
583 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200584 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
585 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
586 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300587 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
588 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200589 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
590 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
591 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600592 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
593 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
594 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100595 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
596 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
597 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200598 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
599 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200600 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
601 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100602 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
603 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
604 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200605 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
606 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
607 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
608 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100609 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
610 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
611 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100612 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
613 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
614 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200615 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
616 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
617 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400618 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200619 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
620 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100621 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
622 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
623 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
624 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200625 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
626 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
627 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530628 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
629 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
630 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200631 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
632 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
633 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200634 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
635 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530636 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
637 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
638 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200639 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
640 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
641 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530642 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
643 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
644 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
645 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
646 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200647 *
648 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
649 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800650 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200651enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200652 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200653 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
654 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
655 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
656 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
657 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
658 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
659 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
660 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
661 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
662 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
663 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
664 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600665 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100666 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200667 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200668 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100669 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200670 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100671 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100672 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200673 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400674 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200675 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100676 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200677 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530678 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200679 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530680 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200681 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530682 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200683};
684
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200685#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
686
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200687/**
688 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
689 *
690 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
691 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530692 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
693 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200694 *
695 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
696 */
697enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
698 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530699 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200700};
701
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200702/*
703 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
704 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
705 */
706#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
707 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
708 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
709 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
710 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100711 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200712 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200713 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200714
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530715/**
716 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
717 * Rate Control algorithm.
718 *
719 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
720 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
721 *
722 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
723 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
724 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
725 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
726 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100727 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
728 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530729 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
730 * Greenfield mode.
731 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100732 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
733 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
734 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530735 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
736 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
737 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
738 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
739 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200740enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
741 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
742 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
743 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
744
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100745 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200746 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
747 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
748 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
749 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
750 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100751 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
752 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
753 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800754};
755
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200756
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200757/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
758#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200759
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200760/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
761#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
762
763/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200764#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200765
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200766/* maximum number of rate table entries */
767#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
768
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200769/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200770 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200771 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200772 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
773 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200774 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200775 *
776 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
777 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
778 *
779 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
780 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200781 *
782 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
783 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
784 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
785 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
786 * information
787 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
788 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
789 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
790 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
791 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
792 * information should then contain
793 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
794 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
795 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200796 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200797struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
798 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100799 u16 count:5,
800 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000801} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200802
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100803#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
804
805static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
806 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
807{
808 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200809 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
810 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100811}
812
813static inline u8
814ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
815{
816 return rate->idx & 0xF;
817}
818
819static inline u8
820ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
821{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200822 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100823}
824
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200825/**
826 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200827 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200828 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
829 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
830 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
831 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
832 *
833 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200834 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200835 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100836 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700837 * @control: union for control data
838 * @status: union for status data
839 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100840 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700841 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100842 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700843 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200844 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200845 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200846struct ieee80211_tx_info {
847 /* common information */
848 u32 flags;
849 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200850
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200851 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100852
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100853 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100854
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200855 union {
856 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200857 union {
858 /* rate control */
859 struct {
860 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
861 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
862 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200863 u8 use_rts:1;
864 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200865 u8 short_preamble:1;
866 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200867 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200868 };
869 /* only needed before rate control */
870 unsigned long jiffies;
871 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200872 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200873 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
874 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200875 u32 flags;
876 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200877 } control;
878 struct {
Johannes Berg3b79af92015-06-01 23:14:59 +0200879 u64 cookie;
880 } ack;
881 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200882 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200883 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200884 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100885 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200886 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300887 u16 tx_time;
888 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200889 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200890 struct {
891 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
892 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200893 u8 pad[4];
894
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200895 void *rate_driver_data[
896 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
897 };
898 void *driver_data[
899 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200900 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700901};
902
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300903/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200904 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
905 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200906 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
907 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
908 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200909 *
910 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
911 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
912 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
913 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
914 */
915struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
916 const u8 *ies[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
917 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
918 const u8 *common_ies;
919 size_t common_ie_len;
920};
921
922
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200923static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
924{
925 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
926}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400927
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200928static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
929{
930 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
931}
932
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200933/**
934 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
935 *
936 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
937 *
938 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
939 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
940 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
941 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
942 *
943 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
944 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
945 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
946 */
947static inline void
948ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
949{
950 int i;
951
952 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
953 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
954 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
955 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
956 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
957 /* clear the rate counts */
958 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
959 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
960
961 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200962 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200963 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
964 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
965 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
966}
967
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400968
969/**
970 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
971 *
972 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
973 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
974 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
975 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400976 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
977 * verification has been done by the hardware.
978 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
979 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
980 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +0200981 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
982 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
983 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
984 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -0400985 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
986 * the frame.
987 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
988 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800989 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +0100990 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
991 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
992 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800993 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
994 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
995 * (including FCS) was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +0200996 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200997 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100998 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200999 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
1000 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +01001001 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1002 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001003 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
1004 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1005 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001006 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1007 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1008 * each A-MPDU
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001009 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1010 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1011 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1012 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1013 * on this subframe
1014 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1015 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001016 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001017 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001018 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
1019 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001020 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1021 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1022 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1023 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1024 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1025 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1026 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1027 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1028 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001029 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1030 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1031 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001032 */
1033enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001034 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1035 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1036 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1037 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1038 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1039 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001040 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001041 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
1042 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
1043 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
1044 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
1045 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
1046 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
1047 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001048 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(15),
1049 /* bit 16 free */
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001050 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
1051 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
1052 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
1053 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001054 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001055 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001056 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001057 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001058 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
1059 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001060 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001061 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(31),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001062};
1063
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001064#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
1065
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001066/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001067 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
1068 *
1069 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
1070 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1071 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001072 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +02001073 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001074 */
1075enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
1076 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergf89903d2015-01-15 16:02:46 +01001077 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(1),
1078 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001079};
1080
1081/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001082 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1083 *
1084 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1085 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001086 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001087 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001088 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1089 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001090 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1091 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001092 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001093 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001094 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1095 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1096 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001097 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1098 * values were filled.
1099 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1100 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001101 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001102 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001103 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1104 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001105 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001106 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001107 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001108 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1109 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1110 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001111 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001112struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1113 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001114 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001115 u32 ampdu_reference;
1116 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001117 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001118 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001119 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001120 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001121 u8 rx_flags;
1122 u8 band;
1123 u8 antenna;
1124 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001125 u8 chains;
1126 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001127 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001128};
1129
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001130/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001131 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1132 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1133 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1134 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1135 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1136 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1137 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1138 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1139 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1140 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1141 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1142 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1143 * @data field.
1144 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1145 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1146 * length
1147 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1148 *
1149 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1150 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1151 * data.
1152 */
1153struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1154 u32 present;
1155 u8 align;
1156 u8 oui[3];
1157 u8 subns;
1158 u8 pad;
1159 u16 len;
1160 u8 data[];
1161} __packed;
1162
1163/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001164 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1165 *
1166 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1167 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001168 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1169 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1170 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001171 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1172 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1173 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1174 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1175 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1176 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1177 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001178 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1179 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1180 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1181 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1182 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001183 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1184 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001185 */
1186enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001187 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001188 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001189 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001190 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001191};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001192
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001193
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001194/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001195 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1196 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001197 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001198 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001199 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001200 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001201 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001202 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001203 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001204 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001205 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1206 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001207 */
1208enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001209 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001210 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001211 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001212 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001213 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1214 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1215 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001216 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001217};
1218
1219/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001220 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1221 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001222 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1223 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1224 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1225 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1226 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001227 */
1228enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1229 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1230 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1231 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1232 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1233
1234 /* keep last */
1235 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1236};
1237
1238/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001239 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1240 *
1241 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1242 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001243 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1244 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001245 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001246 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1247 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1248 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001249 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1250 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1251 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1252 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001253 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1254 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001255 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001256 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001257 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001258 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001259 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001260 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1261 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001262 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001263 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1264 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001265 *
1266 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1267 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001268 * configured for an HT channel.
1269 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1270 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001271 */
1272struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001273 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001274 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001275
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001276 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001277 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001278
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001279 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1280
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001281 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001282 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001283 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001284};
1285
1286/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001287 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1288 *
1289 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1290 * operation.
1291 *
1292 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1293 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1294 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1295 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001296 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1297 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001298 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1299 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001300 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001301 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1302 */
1303struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1304 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001305 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001306 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001307 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001308 u8 count;
1309};
1310
1311/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001312 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1313 *
1314 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1315 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001316 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1317 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1318 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1319 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001320 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1321 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1322 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1323 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001324 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1325 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1326 * this is not pure P2P vif.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001327 */
1328enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1329 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001330 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001331 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001332 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001333};
1334
1335/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001336 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1337 *
1338 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1339 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1340 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001341 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001342 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1343 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001344 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001345 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1346 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001347 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1348 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1349 * for read access.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001350 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1351 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1352 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1353 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001354 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1355 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001356 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1357 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1358 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1359 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1360 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001361 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001362 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001363 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001364 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1365 * interface.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001366 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1367 * sizeof(void *).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001368 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001369 */
1370struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001371 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001372 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001373 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001374 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001375 bool csa_active;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001376
1377 u8 cab_queue;
1378 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1379
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001380 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1381
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001382 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1383
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001384 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001385
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001386#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1387 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1388#endif
1389
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001390 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1391
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001392 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001393 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001394};
1395
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001396static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1397{
1398#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001399 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001400#endif
1401 return false;
1402}
1403
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001404/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001405 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1406 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1407 *
1408 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1409 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1410 *
1411 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1412 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1413 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1414 */
1415struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1416
1417/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001418 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1419 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1420 *
1421 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1422 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1423 *
1424 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1425 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1426 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1427 */
1428struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1429
1430/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001431 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1432 *
1433 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1434 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1435 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001436 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1437 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001438 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1439 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001440 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1441 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1442 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001443 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1444 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001445 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001446 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1447 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001448 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001449 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001450 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001451 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1452 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1453 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001454 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1455 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1456 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1457 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1458 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1459 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1460 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001461 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001462 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001463 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001464 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1465 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1466 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001467 */
1468enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001469 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1470 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1471 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1472 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1473 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1474 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1475 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001476 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001477};
1478
1479/**
1480 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1481 *
1482 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1483 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1484 *
1485 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1486 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001487 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001488 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001489 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX on non-TKIP keys, may be used by the driver
1490 * as well if it needs to do software PN assignment by itself
1491 * (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001492 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1493 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1494 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001495 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1496 * data block:
1497 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1498 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1499 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001500 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1501 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001502 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001503struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001504 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001505 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001506 u8 icv_len;
1507 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001508 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001509 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001510 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001511 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001512 u8 key[0];
1513};
1514
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001515#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1516
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001517/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001518 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1519 *
1520 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1521 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1522 * reverse order than in packet)
1523 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1524 * reverse order than in packet)
1525 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1526 * reverse order than in packet)
1527 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1528 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001529 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001530 */
1531struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1532 union {
1533 struct {
1534 u32 iv32;
1535 u16 iv16;
1536 } tkip;
1537 struct {
1538 u8 pn[6];
1539 } ccmp;
1540 struct {
1541 u8 pn[6];
1542 } aes_cmac;
1543 struct {
1544 u8 pn[6];
1545 } aes_gmac;
1546 struct {
1547 u8 pn[6];
1548 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001549 struct {
1550 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1551 u8 seq_len;
1552 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001553 };
1554};
1555
1556/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001557 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1558 *
1559 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1560 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1561 *
1562 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1563 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1564 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1565 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1566 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1567 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1568 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1569 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1570 * key_idx value calculation:
1571 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1572 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1573 */
1574struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1575 u32 cipher;
1576 u16 iftype;
1577 u8 hdr_len;
1578 u8 pn_len;
1579 u8 pn_off;
1580 u8 key_idx_off;
1581 u8 key_idx_mask;
1582 u8 key_idx_shift;
1583 u8 mic_len;
1584};
1585
1586/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001587 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1588 *
1589 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1590 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1591 *
1592 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1593 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1594 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001595enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001596 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001597};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001598
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001599/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001600 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1601 *
1602 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1603 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1604 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1605 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1606 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1607 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1608 */
1609enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1610 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1611 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1612 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1613 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1614 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1615 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1616};
1617
1618/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001619 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1620 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1621 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1622 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1623 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1624 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1625 *
1626 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1627 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1628 */
1629enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1630 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1631 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1632 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1633 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1634};
1635
1636/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001637 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1638 *
1639 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001640 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001641 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1642 */
1643struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1644 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1645 struct {
1646 s8 idx;
1647 u8 count;
1648 u8 count_cts;
1649 u8 count_rts;
1650 u16 flags;
1651 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1652};
1653
1654/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001655 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1656 *
1657 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1658 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1659 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1660 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1661 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001662 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001663 *
1664 * @addr: MAC address
1665 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001666 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001667 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1668 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001669 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1670 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001671 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1672 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001673 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1674 * if wme is supported.
1675 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001676 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001677 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1678 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1679 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1680 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001681 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001682 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001683 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001684 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1685 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301686 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001687 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001688 */
1689struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +01001690 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001691 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1692 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001693 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001694 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001695 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001696 u8 uapsd_queues;
1697 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001698 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001699 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001700 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001701 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001702 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001703 bool tdls_initiator;
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301704 bool mfp;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001705
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001706 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1707
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001708 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001709 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001710};
1711
1712/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001713 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1714 *
1715 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301716 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001717 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001718 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1719 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1720 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001721enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001722 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1723};
1724
1725/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001726 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1727 *
1728 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1729 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1730 */
1731struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1732 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1733};
1734
1735/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001736 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1737 *
1738 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1739 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1740 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1741 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001742 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001743 *
1744 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1745 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1746 */
1747struct ieee80211_txq {
1748 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1749 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1750 u8 tid;
1751 u8 ac;
1752
1753 /* must be last */
1754 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1755};
1756
1757/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001758 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1759 *
1760 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1761 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1762 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1763 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1764 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1765 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001766 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1767 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1768 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1769 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1770 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1771 * algorithm.
1772 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1773 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1774 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1775 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1776 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1777 * CCK frames.
1778 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001779 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1780 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1781 * the FCS at the end.
1782 *
1783 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1784 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1785 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1786 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1787 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1788 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001789 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001790 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001791 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1792 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1793 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1794 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1795 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001796 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1797 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1798 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1799 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1800 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001801 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1802 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1803 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301804 *
1805 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1806 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001807 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001808 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1809 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1810 *
1811 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1812 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1813 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1814 *
1815 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1816 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001817 *
1818 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1819 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001820 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301821 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1822 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1823 * the stack.
1824 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001825 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001826 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1827 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001828 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001829 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1830 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1831 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001832 *
1833 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1834 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1835 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1836 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1837 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1838 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001839 *
1840 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1841 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1842 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1843 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1844 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1845 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001846 *
1847 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1848 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1849 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001850 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001851 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1852 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1853 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001854 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001855 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1856 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1857 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1858 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001859 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1860 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1861 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1862 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1863 * supported cipher suites.
1864 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01001865 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
1866 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
1867 * for frames.
1868 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001869 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1870 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1871 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1872 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001873 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001874 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1875 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1876 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001877 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1878 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1879 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001880 *
1881 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1882 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001883 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001884 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1885 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1886 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1887 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001888 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1889 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1890 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1891 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001892 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001893 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1894 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1895 *
Johannes Bergc526a462015-06-02 20:32:00 +02001896 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001897 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001898 *
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03001899 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
1900 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
1901 *
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03001902 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
1903 * within A-MPDU.
1904 *
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02001905 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
1906 * for sent beacons.
1907 *
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02001908 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
1909 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
1910 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
1911 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
1912 *
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001913 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001914 */
1915enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001916 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
1917 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
1918 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
1919 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
1920 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
1921 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
1922 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
1923 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
1924 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
1925 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
1926 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
1927 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
1928 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
1929 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
1930 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
1931 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
1932 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
1933 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
1934 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
1935 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
1936 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
1937 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
1938 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
1939 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
1940 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
1941 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
1942 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
1943 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
1944 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03001945 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03001946 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02001947 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02001948 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001949
1950 /* keep last, obviously */
1951 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001952};
1953
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001954/**
1955 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001956 *
1957 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
1958 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
1959 *
1960 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
1961 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
1962 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001963 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
1964 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001965 *
1966 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
1967 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001968 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
1969 * along with this structure.
1970 *
1971 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
1972 *
1973 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
1974 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
1975 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001976 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
1977 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001978 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001979 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001980 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001981 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001982 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001983 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001984 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001985 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02001986 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
1987 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
1988 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001989 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
1990 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
1991 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001992 *
1993 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1994 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001995 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1996 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001997 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1998 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001999 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2000 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002001 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002002 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2003 * can handle.
2004 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2005 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002006 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002007 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002008 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2009 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2010 * aggregation.
2011 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2012 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2013 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002014 *
2015 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
Gregory Greenmanac062192015-11-17 10:24:38 +02002016 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit. Though ADDBA will advertise
2017 * a constant value of 64 as some older APs can crash if the window
2018 * size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N with FW v1.0.07
2019 * build 002 Jun 18 2012).
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002020 *
2021 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2022 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002023 *
2024 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2025 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2026 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
2027 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002028 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002029 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2030 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2031 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
2032 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002033 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002034 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2035 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002036 *
2037 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2038 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2039 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2040 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2041 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2042 * neither enabled.
2043 *
2044 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2045 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2046 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002047 *
2048 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2049 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2050 * supported by HW.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002051 *
2052 * @txq_ac_max_pending: maximum number of frames per AC pending in all txq
2053 * entries for a vif.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002054 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002055struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002056 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002057 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002058 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002059 void *priv;
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002060 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002061 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002062 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002063 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002064 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002065 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002066 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002067 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002068 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002069 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002070 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002071 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002072 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002073 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002074 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002075 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002076 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002077 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002078 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002079 u8 uapsd_queues;
2080 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002081 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2082 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002083 int txq_ac_max_pending;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002084};
2085
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002086static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2087 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2088{
2089 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2090}
2091#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2092
2093static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2094 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2095{
2096 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2097}
2098#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2099
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002100/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002101 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2102 *
2103 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2104 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2105 */
2106struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2107 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2108
2109 /* Keep last */
2110 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2111};
2112
2113/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002114 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2115 *
2116 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2117 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2118 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2119 * @status: channel-switch response status
2120 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2121 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2122 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2123 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2124 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2125 */
2126struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2127 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2128 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2129 u8 action_code;
2130 u32 status;
2131 u32 timestamp;
2132 u16 switch_time;
2133 u16 switch_timeout;
2134 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2135 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2136};
2137
2138/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002139 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2140 *
2141 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2142 *
2143 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2144 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2145 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2146 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2147 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002148 *
2149 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002150 */
2151struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2152
2153/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002154 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2155 *
2156 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2157 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2158 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002159static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2160{
2161 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2162}
2163
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002164/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002165 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002166 *
2167 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2168 * @addr: the address to set
2169 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002170static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 *addr)
2171{
2172 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2173}
2174
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002175static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2176ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002177 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002178{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002179 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002180 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002181 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002182}
2183
2184static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2185ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002186 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002187{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002188 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002189 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002190 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002191}
2192
2193static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2194ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002195 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002196{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002197 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002198 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002199 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002200}
2201
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002202/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002203 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2204 * @hw: the hardware
2205 * @skb: the skb
2206 *
2207 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2208 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2209 */
2210void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2211
2212/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002213 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002214 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002215 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2216 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2217 *
2218 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2219 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002220 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2221 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2222 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002223 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2224 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2225 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002226 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2227 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2228 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2229 *
2230 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2231 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2232 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2233 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2234 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002235 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2236 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2237 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2238 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2239 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002240 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2241 *
2242 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2243 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2244 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2245 * based on the receive flags.
2246 *
2247 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2248 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2249 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2250 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002251 *
2252 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2253 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2254 * handler.
2255 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002256 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002257 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2258 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002259 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002260 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002261 *
2262 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2263 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2264 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002265 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002266
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002267/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002268 * DOC: Powersave support
2269 *
2270 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2271 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002272 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2273 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2274 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2275 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2276 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2277 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2278 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2279 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002280 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002281 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2282 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2283 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002284 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2285 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002286 *
2287 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2288 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2289 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002290 *
2291 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2292 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2293 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2294 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002295 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2296 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002297 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002298 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002299 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2300 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2301 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2302 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2303 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2304 * periods.
2305 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002306 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002307 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2308 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2309 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2310 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2311 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2312 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2313 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2314 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2315 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2316 *
2317 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002318 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002319 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002320 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2321 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2322 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2323 *
2324 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2325 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002326 */
2327
2328/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002329 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2330 *
2331 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002332 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002333 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2334 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2335 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2336 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2337 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2338 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002339 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2340 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002341 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2342 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2343 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2344 *
2345 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2346 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2347 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2348 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2349 *
2350 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2351 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2352 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2353 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2354 * - a list of information element IDs
2355 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2356 *
2357 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2358 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2359 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2360 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2361 * vendor information elements.
2362 *
2363 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2364 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2365 *
2366 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2367 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2368 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2369 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2370 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2371 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2372 *
2373 *
2374 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2375 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2376 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2377 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2378 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2379 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2380 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2381 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2382 *
2383 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2384 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2385 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002386 */
2387
2388/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002389 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2390 *
2391 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2392 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2393 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2394 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2395 *
2396 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2397 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2398 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2399 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2400 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2401 * hardware flags.
2402 *
2403 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2404 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2405 * turned off otherwise.
2406 *
2407 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2408 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2409 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2410 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2411 */
2412
2413/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002414 * DOC: Frame filtering
2415 *
2416 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2417 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2418 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2419 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2420 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2421 *
2422 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2423 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2424 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2425 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002426 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2427 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2428 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2429 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2430 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2431 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2432 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002433 *
2434 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2435 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2436 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2437 * or dropped.
2438 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002439 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2440 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2441 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2442 * the flag, but not clear it.
2443 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2444 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2445 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2446 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2447 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2448 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2449 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2450 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002451 */
2452
2453/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002454 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2455 *
2456 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2457 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2458 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2459 *
2460 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2461 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2462 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2463 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2464 * the driver code.
2465 *
2466 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2467 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2468 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2469 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2470 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2471 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2472 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2473 *
2474 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2475 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2476 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2477 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2478 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2479 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2480 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2481 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2482 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2483 * @sta_notify callback.
2484 *
2485 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2486 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2487 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2488 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2489 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2490 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2491 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002492 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002493 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2494 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2495 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2496 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2497 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2498 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2499 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002500 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2501 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2502 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002503 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2504 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2505 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2506 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2507 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2508 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2509 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2510 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2511 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2512 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2513 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2514 *
2515 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2516 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2517 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2518 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2519 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2520 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2521 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2522 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2523 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2524 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002525 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002526 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2527 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2528 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2529 *
2530 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2531 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2532 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2533 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2534 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002535 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002536 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2537 *
2538 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2539 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2540 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2541 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002542 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002543 *
2544 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2545 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2546 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2547 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002548 */
2549
2550/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002551 * DOC: HW queue control
2552 *
2553 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2554 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2555 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2556 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2557 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2558 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2559 *
2560 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2561 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2562 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2563 *
2564 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2565 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2566 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2567 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2568 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2569 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2570 * the hardware queue.
2571 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2572 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2573 *
2574 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2575 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2576 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2577 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2578 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2579 *
2580 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2581 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2582 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2583 * off-channel queue: 9
2584 *
2585 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2586 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2587 *
2588 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2589 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2590 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2591 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2592 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2593 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2594 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2595 *
2596 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2597 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2598 *
2599 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2600 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2601 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2602 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2603 */
2604
2605/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002606 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2607 *
2608 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2609 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2610 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2611 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2612 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002613 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2614 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2615 * multicast address.
2616 *
2617 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2618 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2619 *
2620 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2621 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2622 *
2623 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2624 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2625 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2626 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2627 * honour this flag if possible.
2628 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002629 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2630 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002631 *
2632 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002633 *
Jakub Kicinskic2d39552015-06-02 21:10:13 +02002634 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002635 *
2636 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002637 */
2638enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002639 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2640 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2641 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2642 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2643 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2644 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002645 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002646 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002647};
2648
2649/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002650 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2651 *
2652 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2653 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002654 *
2655 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2656 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002657 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002658 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2659 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002660 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2661 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2662 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002663 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002664 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2665 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2666 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2667 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2668 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2669 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2670 * session is gone and removes the station.
2671 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2672 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2673 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2674 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002675 */
2676enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2677 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2678 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002679 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002680 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2681 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2682 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002683 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002684};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002685
2686/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002687 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2688 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002689 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2690 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002691 */
2692enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2693 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002694 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002695};
2696
2697/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002698 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2699 *
2700 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002701 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2702 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2703 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002704 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002705 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2706 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2707 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002708 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2709 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002710 */
2711enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2712 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2713 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002714 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002715 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002716};
2717
2718/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002719 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2720 *
2721 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2722 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2723 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2724 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2725 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2726 *
2727 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2728 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2729 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2730 */
2731enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2732 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2733 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2734};
2735
2736/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002737 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2738 *
2739 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2740 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2741 *
2742 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2743 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2744 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2745 * of wowlan configuration)
2746 */
2747enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2748 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2749 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2750};
2751
2752/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002753 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2754 *
2755 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2756 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2757 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2758 *
2759 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2760 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2761 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002762 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002763 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002764 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002765 *
2766 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2767 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2768 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2769 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2770 * or zero.
2771 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2772 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2773 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002774 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002775 *
2776 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2777 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2778 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2779 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002780 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2781 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002782 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002783 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002784 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2785 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2786 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2787 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2788 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002789 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2790 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2791 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2792 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002793 *
2794 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2795 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2796 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2797 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2798 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2799 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002800 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2801 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2802 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2803 * in suspend().
2804 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002805 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002806 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002807 * and @stop must be implemented.
2808 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2809 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2810 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2811 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2812 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002813 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002814 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002815 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2816 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2817 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2818 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2819 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2820 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002821 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2822 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2823 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2824 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2825 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2826 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2827 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002828 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002829 *
2830 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2831 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002832 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002833 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002834 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002835 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2836 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2837 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2838 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2839 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002840 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2841 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002842 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002843 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2844 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2845 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2846 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002847 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2848 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002849 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002850 *
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03002851 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
2852 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
2853 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
2854 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
2855 * which flags are changed.
2856 * This callback can sleep.
2857 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002858 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002859 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002860 *
2861 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002862 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2863 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002864 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002865 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002866 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002867 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002868 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2869 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2870 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002871 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002872 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002873 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2874 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2875 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2876 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2877 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2878 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002879 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2880 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2881 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2882 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002883 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002884 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02002885 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2886 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02002887 * that power save is disabled.
2888 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2889 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2890 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2891 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2892 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2893 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2894 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002895 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002896 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002897 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2898 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2899 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2900 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2901 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2902 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2903 * The callback can sleep.
2904 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002905 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2906 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2907 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2908 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2909 *
2910 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01002911 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002912 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002913 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2914 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02002915 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
2916 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
2917 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002918 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002919 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
2920 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
2921 * this notification.
2922 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002923 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002924 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
2925 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002926 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002927 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02002928 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
2929 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
2930 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002931 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002932 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002933 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
2934 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
2935 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
2936 * The callback can sleep.
2937 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002938 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002939 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002940 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002941 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
2942 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2943 *
2944 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002945 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
2946 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
2947 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
2948 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2949 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002950 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302951 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
2952 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
2953 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2954 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
2955 *
2956 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
2957 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
2958 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002959 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002960 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
2961 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
2962 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01002963 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002964 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
2965 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
2966 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
2967 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002968 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
2969 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
2970 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
2971 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2972 * The callback can sleep.
2973 *
2974 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
2975 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
2976 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
2977 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
2978 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002979 * The callback can sleep.
2980 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002981 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
2982 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
2983 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
2984 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
2985 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
2986 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
2987 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01002988 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
2989 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
2990 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002991 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01002992 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
2993 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
2994 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
2995 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
2996 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
2997 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
2998 * The callback can sleep.
2999 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003000 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02003001 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003002 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003003 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003004 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003005 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003006 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003007 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003008 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003009 *
3010 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02003011 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003012 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003013 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003014 *
3015 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3016 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3017 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3018 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003019 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003020 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003021 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3022 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3023 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003024 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003025 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02003026 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003027 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
3028 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3029 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3030 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. Starting sequence number (@ssn)
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003031 * is the first frame we expect to perform the action on. Notice
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003032 * that TX/RX_STOP can pass NULL for this parameter.
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01003033 * The @buf_size parameter is only valid when the action is set to
3034 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's reorder
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02003035 * buffer size (number of subframes) for this session -- the driver
3036 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than this
3037 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3038 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3039 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3040 * - TX: 1.....7
3041 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
3042 * - TX: 8..1...
3043 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3044 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3045 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
3046 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
Emmanuel Grumbache3abc8f2015-08-16 11:13:22 +03003047 * The @amsdu parameter is valid when the action is set to
3048 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's ability
3049 * to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02003050 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003051 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02003052 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003053 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003054 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3055 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003056 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3057 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3058 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003059 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003060 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003061 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3062 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003063 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3064 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3065 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003066 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003067 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3068 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003069 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003070 *
3071 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003072 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3073 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3074 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3075 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003076 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003077 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003078 *
3079 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3080 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3081 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3082 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003083 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003084 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3085 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3086 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3087 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3088 *
3089 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003090 *
3091 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3092 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3093 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3094 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3095 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3096 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003097 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003098 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3099 * must be accepted in this case.
3100 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003101 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3102 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003103 *
3104 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3105 *
3106 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303107 *
3108 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3109 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303110 *
3111 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3112 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3113 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003114 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3115 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003116 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003117 *
3118 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3119 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3120 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3121 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003122 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003123 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3124 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3125 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3126 * more-data bit must always be set.
3127 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3128 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003129 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3130 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3131 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3132 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3133 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3134 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003135 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3136 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3137 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003138 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3139 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003140 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003141 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003142 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003143 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3144 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3145 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003146 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003147 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3148 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3149 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3150 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003151 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003152 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003153 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3154 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3155 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003156 *
3157 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3158 *
3159 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3160 *
3161 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3162 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3163 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003164 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3165 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3166 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3167 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3168 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3169 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3170 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3171 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3172 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3173 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3174 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3175 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003176 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003177 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3178 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3179 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3180 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3181 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3182 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3183 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3184 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3185 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003186 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303187 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003188 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303189 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003190 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3191 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3192 * channel context with different settings
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303193 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003194 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3195 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303196 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003197 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3198 * unbound from vif.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303199 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003200 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3201 * another, as specified in the list of
3202 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3203 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303204 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003205 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003206 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3207 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3208 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3209 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3210 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3211 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3212 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003213 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003214 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3215 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3216 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3217 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3218 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003219 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003220 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3221 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3222 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003223 *
3224 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3225 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3226 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003227 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003228 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3229 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003230 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003231 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003232 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3233 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003234 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3235 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3236 * gets a CSA or an userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3237 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003238 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3239 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3240 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003241 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003242 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3243 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3244 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3245 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003246 *
3247 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3248 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3249 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003250 *
3251 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3252 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003253 *
3254 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3255 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3256 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3257 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3258 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3259 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3260 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3261 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3262 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003263 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3264 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3265 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3266 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3267 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3268 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3269 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003270 *
3271 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003272 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003273struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003274 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3275 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3276 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003277 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003278 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003279#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3280 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3281 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003282 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003283#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003284 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003285 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003286 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3287 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003288 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003289 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003290 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003291 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003292 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3293 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3294 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3295 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003296
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003297 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3298 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3299
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003300 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003301 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003302 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3303 unsigned int changed_flags,
3304 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003305 u64 multicast);
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003306 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3307 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3308 unsigned int filter_flags,
3309 unsigned int changed_flags);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003310 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3311 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003312 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003313 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003314 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003315 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003316 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3317 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3318 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3319 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003320 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3321 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3322 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003323 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3324 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003325 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003326 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003327 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3328 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003329 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3330 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3331 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003332 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003333 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003334 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003335 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3336 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3337 const u8 *mac_addr);
3338 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3339 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003340 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3341 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003342 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3343 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3344 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003345 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003346 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003347 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3348 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3349 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3350 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303351#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3352 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3353 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3354 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3355 struct dentry *dir);
3356 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3357 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3358 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3359 struct dentry *dir);
3360#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003361 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003362 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003363 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3364 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3365 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3366 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003367 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3368 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3369 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003370 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3371 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3372 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3373 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003374 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3375 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3376 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003377 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3378 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3379 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3380 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003381 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003382 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003383 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003384 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3385 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3386 u64 tsf);
3387 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003388 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003389 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003390 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003391 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action,
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01003392 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, u16 *ssn,
Emmanuel Grumbache3abc8f2015-08-16 11:13:22 +03003393 u8 buf_size, bool amsdu);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003394 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3395 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003396 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003397 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003398#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003399 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3400 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003401 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3402 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3403 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003404#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003405 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3406 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003407 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003408 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003409 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003410 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3411 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003412
3413 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003414 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003415 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003416 int duration,
3417 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003418 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003419 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3420 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3421 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303422 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303423 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3424 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003425 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3426 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3427 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003428
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003429 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3430 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3431 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3432 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3433 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003434 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3435 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3436 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3437 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3438 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003439
3440 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3441 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3442 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3443 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3444 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3445 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3446 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3447 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003448
3449 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3450 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003451
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003452 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3453 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3454
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003455 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3456 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3457 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3458 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3459 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3460 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3461 u32 changed);
3462 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3463 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3464 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3465 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3466 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3467 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003468 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3469 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3470 int n_vifs,
3471 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003472
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003473 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3474 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003475
3476#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3477 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3478 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3479 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3480#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003481 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3482 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3483 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003484 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3485 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3486 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003487
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003488 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3489 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3490
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003491 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3492 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003493 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003494 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3495 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003496
3497 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3498 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3499 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3500 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003501 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003502 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3503 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3504 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003505 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3506 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3507 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003508
3509 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3510 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003511};
3512
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003513/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003514 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3515 *
3516 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3517 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3518 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3519 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3520 * @priv_data_len.
3521 *
3522 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3523 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3524 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3525 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3526 *
3527 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3528 */
3529struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3530 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3531 const char *requested_name);
3532
3533/**
3534 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003535 *
3536 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3537 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3538 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3539 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3540 * @priv_data_len.
3541 *
3542 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3543 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003544 *
3545 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003546 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003547static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003548struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003549 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3550{
3551 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3552}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003553
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003554/**
3555 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3556 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003557 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3558 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3559 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003560 *
3561 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003562 *
3563 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003564 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003565int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3566
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003567/**
3568 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3569 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3570 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3571 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3572 */
3573struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3574 int throughput;
3575 int blink_time;
3576};
3577
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003578/**
3579 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3580 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3581 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3582 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3583 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3584 */
3585enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3586 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3587 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3588 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3589};
3590
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003591#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003592const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3593const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3594const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3595const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3596const char *
3597__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3598 unsigned int flags,
3599 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3600 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003601#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003602/**
3603 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3604 *
3605 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3606 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3607 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3608 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3609 *
3610 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003611 *
3612 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003613 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003614static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003615{
3616#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3617 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3618#else
3619 return NULL;
3620#endif
3621}
3622
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003623/**
3624 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3625 *
3626 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3627 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3628 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3629 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3630 *
3631 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003632 *
3633 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003634 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003635static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003636{
3637#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3638 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3639#else
3640 return NULL;
3641#endif
3642}
3643
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003644/**
3645 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3646 *
3647 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3648 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3649 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3650 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3651 *
3652 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003653 *
3654 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003655 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003656static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003657{
3658#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3659 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3660#else
3661 return NULL;
3662#endif
3663}
3664
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003665/**
3666 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3667 *
3668 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3669 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3670 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3671 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3672 *
3673 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003674 *
3675 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003676 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003677static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003678{
3679#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3680 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3681#else
3682 return NULL;
3683#endif
3684}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003685
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003686/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003687 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3688 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003689 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003690 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3691 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3692 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003693 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3694 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3695 *
3696 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003697 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003698static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003699ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003700 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3701 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3702{
3703#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003704 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003705 blink_table_len);
3706#else
3707 return NULL;
3708#endif
3709}
3710
3711/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003712 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3713 *
3714 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3715 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3716 *
3717 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3718 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003719void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3720
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003721/**
3722 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3723 *
3724 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3725 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003726 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003727 *
3728 * @hw: the hardware to free
3729 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003730void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3731
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003732/**
3733 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3734 *
3735 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3736 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3737 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3738 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3739 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3740 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3741 *
3742 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3743 */
3744void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3745
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003746/**
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003747 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003748 *
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003749 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
3750 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3751 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3752 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3753 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
3754 *
3755 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3756 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3757 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
3758 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3759 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
3760 *
3761 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
3762 *
3763 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3764 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3765 * @napi: the NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003766 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003767void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3768 struct napi_struct *napi);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003769
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003770/**
3771 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3772 *
3773 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003774 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3775 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3776 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3777 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003778 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003779 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003780 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3781 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003782 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3783 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003784 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003785 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003786 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003787 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3788 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003789 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003790static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
3791{
3792 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, skb, NULL);
3793}
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003794
3795/**
3796 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3797 *
3798 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003799 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3800 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003801 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003802 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3803 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003804 *
3805 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3806 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003807 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003808void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003809
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003810/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003811 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3812 *
3813 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3814 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3815 *
3816 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003817 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3818 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003819 *
3820 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3821 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3822 */
3823static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3824 struct sk_buff *skb)
3825{
3826 local_bh_disable();
3827 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3828 local_bh_enable();
3829}
3830
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003831/**
3832 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3833 *
3834 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3835 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3836 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3837 *
3838 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3839 *
3840 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3841 * each other.
3842 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003843 * @sta: currently connected sta
3844 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003845 *
3846 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003847 */
3848int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3849
3850/**
3851 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3852 * (in process context)
3853 *
3854 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3855 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3856 * applies.
3857 *
3858 * @sta: currently connected sta
3859 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003860 *
3861 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003862 */
3863static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3864 bool start)
3865{
3866 int ret;
3867
3868 local_bh_disable();
3869 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3870 local_bh_enable();
3871
3872 return ret;
3873}
3874
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003875/*
3876 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3877 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3878 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02003879#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003880
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003881/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003882 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07003883 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003884 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3885 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003886 *
3887 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003888 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3889 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003890 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003891 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3892 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3893 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3894 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3895 *
3896 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3897 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3898 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3899 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3900 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3901 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3902 *
3903 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3904 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3905 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3906 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3907 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003908 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003909void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3910 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003911
3912/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02003913 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3914 *
3915 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3916 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3917 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3918 *
3919 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3920 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3921 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3922 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3923 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3924 */
3925void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3926 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3927 struct sk_buff *skb,
3928 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
3929 int max_rates);
3930
3931/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003932 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
3933 *
3934 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
3935 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
3936 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
3937 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003938 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3939 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003940 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003941 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3942 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003943 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003944 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3945 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003946 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003947void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003948 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003949
3950/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01003951 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
3952 *
3953 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
3954 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
3955 * specific skbs.
3956 *
3957 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
3958 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
3959 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
3960 *
3961 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3962 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
3963 * (NULL for multicast packets)
3964 * @info: tx status information
3965 */
3966void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3967 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3968 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
3969
3970/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003971 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
3972 *
3973 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
3974 *
3975 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3976 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
3977 * for a single hardware.
3978 *
3979 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3980 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3981 */
3982static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3983 struct sk_buff *skb)
3984{
3985 local_bh_disable();
3986 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
3987 local_bh_enable();
3988}
3989
3990/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003991 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003992 *
3993 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
3994 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3995 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003996 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3997 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003998 *
3999 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4000 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004001 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004002void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004003 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004004
4005/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004006 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4007 *
4008 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4009 * connected STA.
4010 *
4011 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4012 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4013 */
4014void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4015
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004016#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4017
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004018/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004019 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4020 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4021 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03004022 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4023 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4024 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004025 */
4026struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4027 u16 tim_offset;
4028 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004029
4030 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004031};
4032
4033/**
4034 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4035 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4036 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4037 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4038 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4039 *
4040 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4041 * obtain the beacon template.
4042 *
4043 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4044 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004045 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4046 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004047 *
4048 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4049 *
4050 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4051 */
4052struct sk_buff *
4053ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4054 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4055 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4056
4057/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004058 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4059 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004060 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004061 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4062 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4063 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4064 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4065 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4066 *
4067 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004068 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004069 *
4070 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4071 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004072 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4073 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004074 *
4075 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004076 *
4077 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004078 */
4079struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4080 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4081 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4082
4083/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004084 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4085 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004086 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004087 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004088 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004089 *
4090 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004091 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004092static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4093 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4094{
4095 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4096}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004097
4098/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004099 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4100 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4101 *
4102 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4103 * This function is called implicitly when
4104 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4105 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4106 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4107 *
4108 * Return: new csa counter value
4109 */
4110u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4111
4112/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004113 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4114 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4115 *
4116 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004117 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004118 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4119 */
4120void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4121
4122/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004123 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004124 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4125 *
4126 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4127 */
4128bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4129
4130
4131/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004132 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4133 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4134 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4135 *
4136 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4137 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4138 *
4139 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004140 *
4141 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004142 */
4143struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4144 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4145
4146/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004147 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4148 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4149 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4150 *
4151 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4152 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4153 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4154 *
4155 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4156 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004157 *
4158 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004159 */
4160struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4161 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4162
4163/**
4164 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4165 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4166 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4167 *
4168 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4169 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4170 * BSSID and address is used.
4171 *
4172 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4173 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004174 *
4175 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004176 */
4177struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4178 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4179
4180/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004181 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4182 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004183 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004184 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4185 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004186 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004187 *
4188 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4189 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004190 *
4191 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004192 */
4193struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004194 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004195 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004196 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004197
4198/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004199 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4200 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004201 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004202 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4203 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004204 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004205 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4206 *
4207 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4208 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4209 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4210 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4211 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004212void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004213 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004214 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004215 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4216
4217/**
4218 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4219 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004220 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004221 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004222 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004223 *
4224 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4225 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4226 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004227 *
4228 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004229 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004230__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4231 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004232 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004233
4234/**
4235 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4236 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004237 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004238 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4239 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004240 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004241 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4242 *
4243 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4244 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4245 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4246 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4247 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004248void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4249 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004250 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004251 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004252 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4253
4254/**
4255 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4256 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004257 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004258 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004259 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004260 *
4261 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4262 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4263 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004264 *
4265 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004266 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004267__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4268 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004269 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004270 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004271
4272/**
4273 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4274 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004275 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004276 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004277 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004278 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004279 *
4280 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4281 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004282 *
4283 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004284 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004285__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4286 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Michal Kazior4ee73f32012-04-11 08:47:56 +02004287 enum ieee80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004288 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004289 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004290
4291/**
4292 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4293 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004294 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004295 *
4296 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4297 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4298 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4299 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004300 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4301 *
4302 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4303 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004304 *
4305 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4306 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4307 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4308 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4309 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4310 * use common code for all beacons.
4311 */
4312struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004313ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004314
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004315/**
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004316 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4317 *
4318 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4319 *
4320 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4321 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4322 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4323 */
4324void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4325 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4326
4327/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004328 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004329 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004330 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4331 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004332 *
4333 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004334 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4335 * with this P1K
4336 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004337 */
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004338static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4339 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4340{
4341 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4342 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4343 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4344
4345 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4346}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004347
4348/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004349 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4350 *
4351 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4352 * and transmitter address.
4353 *
4354 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4355 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4356 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4357 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4358 */
4359void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4360 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4361
4362/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004363 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4364 *
4365 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4366 * in the packet.
4367 *
4368 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4369 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4370 * encrypted with this key
4371 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4372 */
4373void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4374 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004375
4376/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004377 * ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq - get key TX sequence counter
4378 *
4379 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4380 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4381 *
4382 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current TX IV/PN
4383 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV generation is
4384 * offloaded to the device.
4385 *
4386 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4387 * can be done concurrently, for example when queues are stopped
4388 * and the stop has been synchronized.
4389 */
4390void ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4391 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4392
4393/**
4394 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4395 *
4396 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004397 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004398 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4399 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4400 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4401 *
4402 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4403 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4404 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4405 *
4406 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4407 * can be done concurrently.
4408 */
4409void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4410 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4411
4412/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004413 * ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq - set key TX sequence counter
4414 *
4415 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4416 * @seq: new sequence data
4417 *
4418 * This function allows a driver to set the current TX IV/PNs for the
4419 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and the
4420 * device may have transmitted frames using the PTK, e.g. replies to
4421 * ARP requests.
4422 *
4423 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4424 * can be done concurrently.
4425 */
4426void ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4427 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4428
4429/**
4430 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4431 *
4432 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004433 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004434 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4435 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4436 * @seq: new sequence data
4437 *
4438 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4439 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4440 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4441 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4442 *
4443 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4444 * can be done concurrently.
4445 */
4446void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4447 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4448
4449/**
4450 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4451 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4452 *
4453 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4454 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4455 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4456 *
4457 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4458 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4459 */
4460void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4461
4462/**
4463 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4464 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4465 * @keyconf: new key data
4466 *
4467 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4468 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4469 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4470 *
4471 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4472 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4473 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4474 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4475 *
4476 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4477 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4478 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4479 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4480 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4481 * of the reconfiguration.
4482 *
4483 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4484 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4485 *
4486 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4487 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4488 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4489 * the key that's being replaced.
4490 */
4491struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4492ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4493 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4494
4495/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004496 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4497 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4498 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4499 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4500 * @gfp: allocation flags
4501 */
4502void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4503 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4504
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004505/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004506 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4507 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4508 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4509 *
4510 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4511 */
4512void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4513
4514/**
4515 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4516 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4517 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4518 *
4519 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4520 */
4521void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4522
4523/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004524 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4525 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4526 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4527 *
4528 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004529 *
4530 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004531 */
4532
4533int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4534
4535/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004536 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4537 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4538 *
4539 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4540 */
4541void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4542
4543/**
4544 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4545 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4546 *
4547 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4548 */
4549void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4550
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004551/**
4552 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4553 *
4554 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4555 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004556 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4557 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004558 *
4559 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004560 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004561 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004562void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004563
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004564/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004565 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4566 *
4567 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4568 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4569 *
4570 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4571 */
4572void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4573
4574/**
4575 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4576 *
4577 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4578 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4579 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4580 * while associating, for instance.
4581 *
4582 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4583 */
4584void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4585
4586/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004587 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4588 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4589 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4590 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4591 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4592 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4593 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4594 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004595 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004596 */
4597enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4598 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4599 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004600 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004601};
4602
4603/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004604 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4605 *
4606 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4607 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4608 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4609 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4610 *
4611 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4612 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4613 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4614 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4615 */
4616void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4617 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4618 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4619 void *data);
4620
4621/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004622 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004623 *
4624 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4625 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004626 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4627 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4628 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004629 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004630 *
4631 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004632 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004633 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004634 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4635 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004636static inline void
4637ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4638 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4639 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4640 void *data)
4641{
4642 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4643 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4644 iterator, data);
4645}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004646
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004647/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004648 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4649 *
4650 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4651 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4652 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4653 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004654 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004655 *
4656 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004657 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004658 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4659 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4660 */
4661void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004662 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004663 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4664 u8 *mac,
4665 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4666 void *data);
4667
4668/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004669 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4670 *
4671 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4672 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4673 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4674 *
4675 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4676 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4677 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4678 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4679 */
4680void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4681 u32 iter_flags,
4682 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4683 u8 *mac,
4684 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4685 void *data);
4686
4687/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004688 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4689 *
4690 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4691 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4692 * function for them.
4693 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4694 *
4695 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4696 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4697 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4698 */
4699void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4700 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4701 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4702 void *data);
4703/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004704 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4705 *
4706 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4707 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4708 *
4709 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4710 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4711 */
4712void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4713
4714/**
4715 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4716 *
4717 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4718 * workqueue.
4719 *
4720 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4721 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4722 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4723 */
4724void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4725 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4726 unsigned long delay);
4727
4728/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004729 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004730 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004731 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304732 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004733 *
4734 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004735 *
4736 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4737 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4738 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4739 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304740int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4741 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004742
4743/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004744 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004745 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004746 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4747 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4748 *
4749 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004750 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4751 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004752 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004753void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004754 u16 tid);
4755
4756/**
4757 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004758 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004759 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004760 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004761 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004762 *
4763 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4764 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4765 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4766 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004767int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004768
4769/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004770 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004771 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004772 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4773 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4774 *
4775 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004776 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4777 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004778 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004779void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004780 u16 tid);
4781
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004782/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004783 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4784 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004785 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004786 * @addr: station's address
4787 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004788 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4789 *
4790 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004791 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4792 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004793struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004794 const u8 *addr);
4795
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004796/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004797 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004798 *
4799 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004800 * @addr: remote station's address
4801 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004802 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004803 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4804 *
4805 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004806 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4807 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004808 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4809 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4810 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4811 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4812 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4813 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4814 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004815 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004816 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004817 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004818struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4819 const u8 *addr,
4820 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004821
4822/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004823 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4824 * @hw: the hardware
4825 * @pubsta: the station
4826 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4827 *
4828 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4829 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4830 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4831 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4832 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4833 *
4834 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4835 * manner.
4836 *
4837 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4838 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4839 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4840 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4841 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4842 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4843 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4844 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4845 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4846 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4847 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4848 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4849 * woke up while blocked or not.
4850 */
4851void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4852 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4853
4854/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004855 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4856 * @pubsta: the station
4857 *
4858 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4859 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4860 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4861 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4862 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004863 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4864 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4865 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4866 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4867 *
4868 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4869 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4870 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4871 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004872 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004873void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004874
4875/**
Emmanuel Grumbach0ead2512015-11-17 10:24:36 +02004876 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
4877 * @pubsta: the station
4878 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
4879 *
4880 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
4881 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
4882 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
4883 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
4884 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
4885 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
4886 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
4887 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
4888 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
4889 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
4890 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
4891 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
4892 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
4893 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
4894 */
4895void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
4896
4897/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004898 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4899 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4900 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4901 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4902 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4903 *
4904 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4905 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4906 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4907 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4908 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4909 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02004910 *
4911 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4912 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4913 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004914 */
4915void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4916 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4917 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4918 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4919 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4920 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4921 void *data),
4922 void *iter_data);
4923
4924/**
Eliad Pelleref044762015-11-17 10:24:37 +02004925 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
4926 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4927 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4928 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4929 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4930 *
4931 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4932 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4933 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
4934 * in removal process will be skipped.
4935 *
4936 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
4937 * and thus iter must be atomic.
4938 */
4939void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4940 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4941 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4942 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4943 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4944 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4945 void *data),
4946 void *iter_data);
4947
4948/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004949 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
4950 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4951 * @iter: iterator function
4952 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
4953 *
4954 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
4955 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
4956 * places while calling into the driver.
4957 *
4958 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
4959 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
4960 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01004961 *
4962 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
4963 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
4964 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
4965 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004966 */
4967void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
4968 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4969 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4970 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
4971 void *data),
4972 void *iter_data);
4973
4974/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004975 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4976 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4977 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4978 *
4979 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4980 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
4981 * information. This function must only be called from within the
4982 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
4983 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004984 * %NULL.
4985 *
4986 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004987 */
4988struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4989 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4990
4991/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004992 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
4993 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004994 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004995 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004996 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004997 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004998 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
4999 */
5000void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005001
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005002/**
5003 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5004 *
5005 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5006 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005007 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005008 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5009 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01005010 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5011 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005012 *
5013 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5014 * without connection recovery attempts.
5015 */
5016void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5017
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005018/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02005019 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5020 *
5021 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5022 *
5023 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5024 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5025 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5026 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5027 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5028 *
5029 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5030 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5031 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5032 * disconnect normally later.
5033 *
5034 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5035 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5036 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5037 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5038 */
5039void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5040
5041/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005042 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5043 * rssi threshold triggered
5044 *
5045 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5046 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5047 * @gfp: context flags
5048 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01005049 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005050 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5051 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5052 */
5053void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5054 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5055 gfp_t gfp);
5056
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005057/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01005058 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5059 *
5060 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5061 * @gfp: context flags
5062 */
5063void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5064
5065/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01005066 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5067 *
5068 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5069 */
5070void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5071
5072/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005073 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5074 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5075 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5076 *
5077 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5078 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5079 */
5080void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5081
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005082/**
5083 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5084 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02005085 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005086 *
5087 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5088 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5089 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5090 */
5091void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5092 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5093
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02005094/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01005095 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5096 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5097 */
5098void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5099
5100/**
5101 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5102 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5103 */
5104void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5105
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005106/**
5107 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5108 *
5109 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5110 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5111 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5112 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5113 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5114 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5115 *
5116 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5117 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5118 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5119 */
5120void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5121 const u8 *addr);
5122
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005123/**
5124 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5125 *
5126 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5127 * buffer.
5128 *
5129 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5130 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5131 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5132 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5133 */
5134void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5135
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005136/**
5137 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5138 *
5139 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5140 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5141 * reordering.
5142 *
5143 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5144 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5145 *
5146 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5147 * @addr: station mac address
5148 * @tid: the rx tid
5149 */
5150void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5151 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5152
5153/**
5154 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5155 *
5156 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5157 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5158 * reordering.
5159 *
5160 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5161 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5162 *
5163 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5164 * @addr: station mac address
5165 * @tid: the rx tid
5166 */
5167void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5168 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5169
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005170/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005171
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005172/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005173 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005174 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005175 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5176 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5177 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005178 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5179 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005180 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5181 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5182 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5183 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5184 * RTS threshold
5185 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5186 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005187 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005188 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
5189 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005190 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005191 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005192 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005193 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005194struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5195 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5196 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5197 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5198 struct sk_buff *skb;
5199 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5200 bool rts, short_preamble;
5201 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005202 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005203 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005204 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005205};
5206
5207struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005208 const char *name;
5209 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005210 void (*free)(void *priv);
5211
5212 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5213 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005214 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005215 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305216 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005217 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005218 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5219 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005220 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5221 void *priv_sta);
5222
Felix Fietkauf6845652014-11-19 20:08:08 +01005223 void (*tx_status_noskb)(void *priv,
5224 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5225 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5226 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005227 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5228 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5229 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005230 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5231 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005232
5233 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5234 struct dentry *dir);
5235 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005236
5237 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005238};
5239
5240static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5241 enum ieee80211_band band,
5242 int index)
5243{
5244 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5245}
5246
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005247/**
5248 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5249 *
5250 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5251 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5252 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5253 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5254 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5255 * not null.
5256 *
5257 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5258 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5259 *
5260 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5261 * that this may be null.
5262 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5263 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5264 */
5265bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5266 void *priv_sta,
5267 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5268
5269
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005270static inline s8
5271rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5272 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5273{
5274 int i;
5275
5276 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5277 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5278 return i;
5279
5280 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005281 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005282
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005283 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005284 return 0;
5285}
5286
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005287static inline
5288bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5289 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5290{
5291 unsigned int i;
5292
5293 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5294 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5295 return true;
5296 return false;
5297}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005298
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005299/**
5300 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5301 *
5302 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5303 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5304 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5305 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5306 *
5307 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5308 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5309 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5310 */
5311int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5312 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5313 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5314
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005315int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5316void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005317
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005318static inline bool
5319conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5320{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005321 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005322}
5323
5324static inline bool
5325conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5326{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005327 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5328 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005329}
5330
5331static inline bool
5332conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5333{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005334 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5335 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005336}
5337
5338static inline bool
5339conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5340{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005341 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005342}
5343
5344static inline bool
5345conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5346{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005347 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5348 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5349 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005350}
5351
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005352static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5353ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5354{
5355 if (p2p) {
5356 switch (type) {
5357 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5358 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5359 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5360 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5361 default:
5362 break;
5363 }
5364 }
5365 return type;
5366}
5367
5368static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5369ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5370{
5371 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5372}
5373
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005374void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5375 int rssi_min_thold,
5376 int rssi_max_thold);
5377
5378void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005379
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005380/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005381 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005382 *
5383 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5384 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005385 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5386 *
5387 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5388 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005389 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005390int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5391
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005392/**
5393 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5394 * @vif: virtual interface
5395 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5396 * @gfp: allocation flags
5397 *
5398 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5399 */
5400void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5401 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5402 gfp_t gfp);
5403
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005404/**
5405 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5406 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5407 * @vif: virtual interface
5408 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5409 * @band: the band to transmit on
5410 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5411 *
5412 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5413 */
5414bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5415 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5416 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5417
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005418/**
5419 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5420 *
5421 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5422 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5423 *
5424 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5425 *
5426 * private:
5427 *
5428 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5429 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5430 */
5431struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5432 u32 next_tsf;
5433 bool has_next_tsf;
5434
5435 u8 absent;
5436
5437 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5438 struct {
5439 u32 start;
5440 u32 duration;
5441 u32 interval;
5442 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5443};
5444
5445/**
5446 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5447 *
5448 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5449 * @data: NoA tracking data
5450 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5451 *
5452 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5453 */
5454int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5455 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5456
5457/**
5458 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5459 *
5460 * @data: NoA tracking data
5461 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5462 */
5463void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5464
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005465/**
5466 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5467 * @vif: virtual interface
5468 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5469 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5470 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5471 * @gfp: allocation flags
5472 *
5473 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5474 */
5475void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5476 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5477 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005478
5479/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005480 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5481 *
5482 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5483 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5484 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5485 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5486 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5487 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5488 *
5489 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5490 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5491 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5492 *
5493 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5494 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5495 *
5496 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5497 */
5498int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5499
5500/**
5501 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5502 *
5503 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5504 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5505 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5506 *
5507 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5508 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5509 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5510 *
5511 * @sta: the station
5512 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5513 */
5514void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5515
5516/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005517 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5518 *
5519 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5520 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5521 *
5522 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5523 */
5524struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5525 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005526#endif /* MAC80211_H */